advertisement
yellow blue
The 1999 Chevrolet Cavalier Owner’s Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells you how to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the “SRS” system.
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
Problems on the Road
This section tells you what to do if you have a problem while driving, such as a flat tire or overheated engine, etc.
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what fluids and lubricants to use.
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on page 8
-
10.
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual. You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary technician certification.
yellow blue
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the name CAVALIER are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10409484 A First Edition
ii
E
Copyright General Motors Corporation 1998
All Rights Reserved
yellow blue
The Heritage of Chevrolet
W
elcome to the largest automotive family in the world -- the family of Chevrolet owners. You have selected a vehicle designed, engineered and crafted by teamwork, a vehicle backed by a proud history of performance and value. Since the first “Classic
Six” rolled off the line in 1912, more than 110 million
Chevrolet cars and trucks have
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shifted gears from making carriages to making cars, forming half the team that gave
birth to Chevrolet. worn the Chevrolet marque.
That kind of reception from auto owners is unmatched by any other car manufacturer in the world.
Louis Chevrolet, the other half of the team, at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six,” which entered production in 1912.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
iii
iv
The Chevrolet blend of value and performance has become an American tradition -- whether bred for the racetrack like the legendary
Corvette and Camaro, or
In 1932 Chevrolet introduced the
Synchro
-
Mesh transmission and offered a host of accessories -- including such niceties as a clock!
created for the pleasure of the open road.
Every decade, Chevrolet has reinforced its heritage of affordable performance with quality and value crafted into each vehicle. It’s not surprising that for 80 years
“Genuine Chevrolet” has been
America’s automobile.
We’re proud to continue that heritage in your Chevrolet,
The legacy of America’s favorite sportscar began in 1953, when 319 hand
assembled white Corvettes launched the first use of a fiberglass body in
a production car.
yellow blue
yellow blue
and we are pledged to make ownership of your
Chevrolet an enjoyable and rewarding experience.
60’s automotive excitement included Chevrolet landmarks like the Corvette Sting Ray, the sporty Camaro, and powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was powered by an available fuel
-
injected V8.
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
v
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.”
yellow blue
vi
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.
yellow blue
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:
These symbols have to do with your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
These symbols are on some of your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
POWER
WINDOW
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
AIR BAG FOG LAMPS
VENTILATING
FAN
viii
These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
COOLANT
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some other symbols you may see:
FUSE
LIGHTER
HORN
SPEAKER
FUEL
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children and Small Adults
Center Passenger Position
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
1-
1-1
yellow blue
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats
--
how to adjust them
--
and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seats
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the lever on the front of the driver’s seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Your vehicle will be equipped with one of the following passenger seat adjusters.
1-2
yellow blue
If your vehicle is not equipped with easy entry seats, your passenger seat adjuster looks like this. Slide the lever under the passenger’s seat to the right to unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you want it. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
If your vehicle is equipped with easy entry seats, this is your front passenger seat adjuster. Pull up on the lever at the front of the passenger’s seat up to unlock it. Slide the seat to a comfortable position. Then release the lever and try to move the seat with your body, to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Manual Lumbar Support (If Equipped)
The manual lumbar support control is located at the front of the driver’s seat, toward the right. Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the amount of support to your lower back.
1-3
Reclining Front Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback to where you want it.
Release the lever to lock the seatback. Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-4
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
yellow blue
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Seatback Latches (2-Door Models)
The front seatback folds forward to let people get into the back seat.
To fold a front seatback forward, lift the latch located on the lower back side of the seatback. Then the seat will fold forward.
1-5
When you return the seatback to its original position, make sure the seatback is locked. The latch must be down for the seat to work properly.
CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
yellow blue
Easy Entry Seat (If Equipped)
CAUTION:
If an easy entry right front seat isn’t locked, it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the person sitting there could be injured. After you’ve used it, be sure to push rearward on an easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
The right front seat of some two
door vehicles makes it easy to get in and out of the rear seat.
D Tilt the right front seatback completely forward and the whole seat will slide forward.
D Move the right front seatback to its original position after someone gets into the rear seat area. Then move the seat rearward until it locks.
D Tilt the seatback completely forward again to get out.
1-6
yellow blue
Rear Seats
Folding the Rear Seat
To open the fold
down rear seat, pull forward on the seat tab.
To close the seat, push the seatback up to its original position.
Check to ensure the seatback is in its original position and securely latched by pulling forward on the top of the seatback. Move any obstructions in the trunk compartment.
1-7
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.
And it explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), or air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.)
yellow blue
1-8
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
yellow blue
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
1-9
Put someone on it.
1-10
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.
yellow blue
yellow blue
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
1-11
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
yellow blue
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
Q:
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be
--
whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts
--
not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
1-12
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident
--
even one that isn’t your fault
--
you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
yellow blue
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-13
yellow blue
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap
shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-14
yellow blue
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-15
1-16
yellow blue
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster (4
-
Door Models)
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.
yellow blue
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move the height adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
yellow blue
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.
1-18
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-19
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-20
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
yellow blue
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
yellow blue
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap
shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
yellow blue
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt. See “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
This part explains the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) or air bag system.
Your vehicle has “Next Generation” frontal air bags
--
one air bag for the driver and another air bag for the right front passenger.
Next Generation frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating air bag. But even these air bags must inflate very quickly if they are to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the air bag system:
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt
--
even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags
--
even Next Generation air bags
--
are designed to work with safety belts, but don’t replace them. Air bags are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low
speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, Next Generation air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly
--
whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.
1-23
CAUTION:
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. This is true even with Next Generation frontal air bags.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with Next Generation air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued) adults, but not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children” and see the caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front passenger’s safety belt.
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has
Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap
shoulder belts offer the best protection for
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-24
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
yellow blue
How the Air Bag System Works
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
1-25
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person. The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering.
yellow blue
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed to inflate in a moderate to severe frontal or near
frontal crash. The air bag will inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 14 mph (14 to 23 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The air bag is not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal or near
frontal impacts.
1-26
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near
frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near
frontal collisions.
yellow blue
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module
--
the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, or the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag
-will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or from being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-27
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
yellow blue
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the sensors are activated and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag system. Improper service can mean that your air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel or both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
1-28
yellow blue
If your vehicle ever gets into a lot of water
--
such as water up to the carpeting or higher
--
or if water enters your vehicle and soaks the carpet, the air bag controller can be soaked and ruined. If this ever happens, and then you start your vehicle, the damage could make the air bags inflate, even if there’s no crash. You would have to replace the air bags as well as the sensors and related parts. If your vehicle is ever in a flood, or if it’s exposed to water that soaks the carpet, you can avoid needless repair costs by turning off the vehicle immediately and disconnecting the battery cables. Don’t let anyone start the vehicle under any circumstances. See your dealer for service.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag system in several places around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the Cavalier Service Manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag system. To purchase a service manual, see “Service and
Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-29
yellow blue
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap
-
Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap
shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-30
yellow blue
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-31
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-32
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
yellow blue
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for small adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown child restraints and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1-33
yellow blue
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of the seatback and the interior body to remove the guide from its storage clip.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-34
yellow blue
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions” earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out from the guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Rotate the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic cord exposed.
1-35
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
yellow blue
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-36
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap
shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
yellow blue
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. This is true even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. Air bags plus lap
shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
1-37
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.
yellow blue
Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear
facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
1-38
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much
--
until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
yellow blue
CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12
lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240
lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
1-39
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add
on child restraints?
A:
Add
on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
yellow blue
1-40
yellow blue
A rear
facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear
facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts
--
the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.
1-41
1-42
yellow blue
A forward
facing child restraint (C
-
E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These forward
facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear
facing infant seat or a forward
facing child seat.
yellow blue
A booster seat (F, G) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster seats with shields use lap
only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap
shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.
1-43
yellow blue
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear
facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear
facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This is because the back of the rear
facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear
facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward
facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle
--
even when no child is in it.
1-44
Top Strap
Canadian law requires that forward
facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.
yellow blue
If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored. If you have a convertible, don’t use a restraint like that in your vehicle because the top strap anchor cannot be installed properly. You shouldn’t use this type of restraint without anchoring the top strap.
If your vehicle is not a convertible and you need to have an anchor installed, you can ask your dealer to put one in for you. This work will be done for you free of charge. If you want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell you how to do it.
1-45
yellow blue
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap
shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-46
yellow blue
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward
facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
1-47
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
1-48
yellow blue
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
yellow blue
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward
facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-49
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never put a rear
facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
yellow blue
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward
facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap
shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward
facing child restraint. (See
“Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear
facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates, even though your vehicle has Next Generation frontal air bags. This is because the back of the rear
facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear
facing child restraint in the rear seat.
1-50
yellow blue
4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-51
Larger Children
yellow blue
6. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-52
Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap
shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
yellow blue
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt. The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap
shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has only a lap belt.
1-53
1-54
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap
shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
yellow blue
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
yellow blue
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.
1-55
✍
NOTES
1-56
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly
--
and what to do if you have a problem.
Keys
Door Locks
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
Theft
Passlock
R
New Vehicle “Break
-
In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Manual Transaxle Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle Only)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle Only)
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle Models Only)
2-
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
(Automatic Transaxle)
Windows
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped)
Sun Visors
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel
--
Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Clusters
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2-1
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
yellow blue
One key is used for the ignition, the doors and all other locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the key tag from the key, and gives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to have a new one made easily using the tag.
yellow blue
If you need a new key, contact your Chevrolet dealer who can obtain the correct key code. In an emergency, call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program at
1
R
(1
-
800
-
243
-
8872). In Canada call
1
-
800
-
CHEV
-
USA
-
800
-
268
-
6800.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of new features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your key inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have an extra key.
2-3
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers
--
especially children
--
can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Use your key to unlock your vehicle from the outside.
You can also use the optional remote keyless entry system to unlock your vehicle. See “Remote Keyless
Entry System” in the Index.
To lock the door from the inside, push the locking lever forward.
yellow blue
To unlock the door, pull the locking lever backward.
2-4
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
You can lock or unlock all doors of your vehicle from the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock switch.
yellow blue
Rear Door Security Lock (4-Door Models)
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside.
Push the lower portion of the switch to lock your doors.
Push the upper portion of the switch to unlock your doors.
The lever on each rear door works only that door’s lock.
It won’t lock (or unlock) all of the doors
--
that’s a safety feature.
To Use One of These Locks
1. Use a key to move the lock all the way up.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from the inside when this feature is in use.
2-5
To Open a Rear Door With the Security Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and older children know how to cancel the locks.
To Cancel the Rear Door Lock
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open the door from the outside.
2. Use a key to move the lock all the way down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door lock will now work normally.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close the door.
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
yellow blue
If your vehicle has this option, you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
In addition, the system illuminates the interior lamps for a set period of time.
The remote keyless entry system consists of a receiver, which is located in the vehicle, and two hand held transmitters.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
2-6
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS
-
210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
yellow blue
This system has a range of about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
2-7
Operation
The following functions are available with the remote keyless entry system:
LOCK: All doors will automatically lock when the
LOCK button on the transmitter is pressed. The interior lamps stay on for a few seconds after all of the doors are closed.
UNLOCK: The driver’s door will unlock automatically when the UNLOCK button on the transmitter is pressed.
If the UNLOCK button is pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior lamps will stay on for approximately 40 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
Trunk Release: The trunk will unlock anytime when the vehicle symbol on the transmitter is pressed and the ignition is OFF. The interior lamps will come on for
40 seconds or until the ignition is turned to ON.
yellow blue
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only two transmitters matched to it.
You can match your transmitter to as many 1999
General Motors vehicles as you own, as long as they have the same remote keyless entry system. Contact your dealer for assistance with this.
2-8
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
Replacing the Battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry System Transmitter
yellow blue
To replace the battery in the transmitter:
1. Use a small coin or flathead screwdriver to separate the bottom half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new one.
Make sure the positive (+) side of the battery faces down. For battery replacement, use a three
volt battery, type CR2032, or equivalent.
2-9
3. Read the instructions inside the case.
4. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the cover is on tightly, so water won’t get in.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, try resynchronizing the transmitter with the receiver.
Resynchronization
Your remote keyless entry system is equipped with a security system that prevents anyone from recording and playing back your signal. The transmitter does not send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been sent to it more than once.
To resynchronize your transmitter and receiver, follow these directions:
1. Stand close to your vehicle.
2. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter at the same time.
3. Hold the buttons for at least five seconds. During this time, the doors should lock and unlock once.
This confirms the resynchronization. If the doors do not lock and unlock, see your dealer for service.
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting on any airflow selection except MAX. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See
“Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
yellow blue
2-10
Remote Trunk Release (If Equipped)
Pull upward on the remote release handle, located on the floor near the left side of the driver’s seat, to release the trunk lid.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft
deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
yellow blue
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves
--
so don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door, you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.
Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your ignition. If you take the key with you, and you have an automatic transaxle, it will be locked. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
2-11
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your key?
D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area.
D Close all windows.
D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system, take the transmitter with you.
Passlock
R
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock theft
deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft
deterrent system. Passlock enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
yellow blue
During normal operation, the THEFT SYSTEM light will go off approximately five seconds after the key is turned to the ON ignition position.
If the engine stalls and the THEFT SYSTEM light flashes, wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart the engine. Remember to release the key from
START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the THEFT SYSTEM light comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this time. You may also want to check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center at 1
-
800
-
CHEV-USA
R
(1
-
800
-
243
-
8872).
In Canada call 1
-
800
-
268
-
6800.
2-12
New Vehicle “Break
-
In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break
in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed
--
fast or slow
--
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full
throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking
in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break
in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
Ignition Positions
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be injured or even killed. They could operate power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in the vehicle with children.
2-13
With the ignition key in the ignition switch, you can turn the switch to five positions.
ACCESSORY (A): In this position, you can operate your electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition switch as you turn it toward you.
yellow blue
LOCK (B): This is the only position in which you can remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition, shift lever and transaxle.
OFF (C): This position unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and transaxle, but does not send electrical power to any accessories. The instrument cluster and the automatic transaxle gear shift indicator have electrical power while in OFF. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed or towed, but never try to push
start your vehicle. A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.
RUN (D): This is a position to which the switch returns after you start your engine and release the switch. The switch stays in RUN when the engine is running. But even when the engine is not running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories, and to display some instrument panel warning lights.
START (E): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to RUN for normal driving.
Note that even if the engine is not running, the positions
ACCESSORY and RUN are on positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories, such as the radio.
2-14
CAUTION:
On manual transaxle vehicles, turning the key to
LOCK will lock the steering column and result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only to OFF. Don’t press the key release button while the vehicle is moving.
yellow blue
Key Release Button (Manual Transaxle)
The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition unless the key release button is used.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
To remove the key, turn the key to OFF. While pressing the key release button in, turn the key to LOCK. Pull the key straight out.
2-15
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position
--
that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet is moving. If you do, you could damage the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transaxle
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down
--
that’s a safety feature.
Starting Your 2.2 Liter L4 Engine
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
2-16
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
yellow blue
Starting Your 2.4 Liter L4 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine warms up.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine doesn’t start right away, and if the weather is very cold (below
-
20
_ F or
-
29
_ C), push the accelerator pedal about one
quarter of the way down while you turn the key to START. Do this until the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.
2-17
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again, repeat step 1 or 2, depending on temperature. When the engine starts, release the key and the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
yellow blue
2.2L L4 Engine
2-18
2.4L L4 Engine
In very cold weather, 0
_F (
-
18
_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm
up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
yellow blue
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On vehicles with a 2.2L L4 engine, the electrical cord is located near the engine oil dipstick. On vehicles with a 2.4L L4 engine, the electrical cord is located in front of the engine coolant surge tank on the passenger’s side.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110
volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three
prong
110
volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy
duty three
prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
2-19
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.
yellow blue
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your vehicle may be equipped with a three
speed automatic transaxle or a four
speed automatic transaxle.
The shift lever is located on the console between the seats.
There are six different positions for the shift lever on the three
speed automatic and seven positions for the four
speed automatic transaxles. While PARK (P),
REVERSE (R) and NEUTRAL (N) operate identically for both transaxles, the forward gear positions represent different gearing and operation. See “Forward Gears
(3
-
Speed)” or “Forward
-
Gears (4
-
Speed)” later in this section.
Three
-
Speed Automatic Transaxle
2-20
Four
-
Speed Automatic Transaxle
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-21
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake
-
Transaxle
Shift Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.) See “Shifting Out of
PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
yellow blue
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Note that a 3-speed transaxle cannot be towed with all four wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-22
Forward Gears (3-Speed)
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use DRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine.
yellow blue
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
2-23
Forward Gears (4-Speed)
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with the four
speed automatic transaxle.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator all the way down.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
D When driving on hilly, winding roads.
D When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible. Don’t shift into
SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than
65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
yellow blue
2-24
NOTICE:
If your front wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Manual Transaxle Operation
5-Speed
yellow blue
2-25
This is your shift pattern.
Here’s how to operate your transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete stop and it’s hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
yellow blue
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or idle your engine.
2-26
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving could damage your transaxle.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake, for parking your vehicle.
Shift Speeds
CAUTION:
If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more than one gear at a time when you down shift.
yellow blue
Up
-
Shift Light (Manual Transaxle)
If you have a manual transaxle, you have a
SHIFT light. This light will show you when to shift to the next higher gear for the best fuel economy.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on and off if you quickly change the position of the accelerator. Ignore the SHIFT light when you downshift.
2-27
Parking Brake
The parking brake lever is located between the bucket seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on.
2-28
yellow blue
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the release button. Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.
yellow blue
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position like this:
D Hold in the button on the lever
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of your vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-29
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transaxle Only)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
yellow blue
Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-30
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transaxle Only)
CAUTION:
Before shifting out of PARK (P) you must fully apply your regular brakes. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
Your vehicle has a Brake
-
Transaxle Shift Interlock
(BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular brakes
before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
yellow blue
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
--
push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P), as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever.)
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transaxle Models Only)
Before you get out of your vehicle, put your manual transaxle in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the parking brake.
2-31
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.
2-32
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
yellow blue
yellow blue
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transaxle)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed
in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust
--
with
CO
--
can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed
in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-33
Windows
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the window crank to open and close each window.
Power Windows (If Equipped)
With power windows, switches on the center console control each of the windows when the ignition is on. In addition, on four
door models, each rear passenger door has a control switch for its own window.
2-34
To lower the window, press and hold the rear of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the switch forward.
Express Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an auto
down feature.
The driver’s window can be opened to the desired amount by pushing the rear of the switch to the first detent. For the auto
down feature, push the rear of the switch all the way down. The window will continue going down until fully opened.
To stop the window while it is lowering, briefly press the switch forward, then release.
Lockout Switch
Four
door models also have a lockout switch. Press the lockout switch to disable the rear passenger’s power window switches. This will prevent rear passengers from opening and closing the windows. The driver can still control all windows with the switch in the lock position.
Press the lockout switch again to enable the passenger’s window switches.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the center of your steering wheel near the horn symbols.
yellow blue
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
yellow blue
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
D Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
D Flash
to
-
Pass
D Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-35
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
yellow blue
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or high beam to low, pull the turn signal lever all the way toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel will also be on.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index) and for burned
out bulbs.
2-36
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high
beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you until the high
beam headlamps come on, then release the lever to turn them off.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by moving the stalk with the windshield wiper symbol on it up or down.
For a single wiper cycle, push the stalk down to MIST, then release it. The wipers will stop after one cycle. For more cycles, hold the wiper stalk down longer.
yellow blue
For steady wiping at low speed, move the wiper stalk up to the (1). For high
speed wiping, move the stalk up to (2). To stop the wipers, move the stalk to OFF.
If your vehicle is equipped with variable delay, you can set the wiper speed for a long or short interval between wipes. This can be very useful.
Move the stalk to DELAY, then turn the inner band and choose the delay you want. Turn the inner band up for a shorter interval between wiper cycles. Turn the band down for a longer interval between wiper cycles.
If your vehicle is equipped with fixed delay, you can use this function by moving the stalk to DELAY.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
2-37
yellow blue
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, pull the stalk with the wiper symbol on it toward you one time. When you release the stalk, the washers will stop. The wipers continue wiping for approximately three cycles and will either stop or will resume the speed you were using before.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, or the clutch pedal if you have a manual transaxle, the cruise control shuts off.
2-38
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
D Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional enhanced traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
(See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.) When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
yellow blue
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use it.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push the SET button at the end of the lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-39
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake or clutch pedal. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can briefly move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there.
If you briefly hold the switch at R/A longer, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake or clutch pedal. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the switch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to a higher speed.
Push the SET button at the end of the lever, then release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
D Move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A.
Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release the switch. To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A then release it. Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
2-40
yellow blue
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:
D Push in the button at the end of the lever until you reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
D To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press the button. Each time you do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
yellow blue
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up a steep hill, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake or clutch pedal takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to turn off the cruise control:
D step lightly on the brake pedal, or push the clutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle, or
D move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Cruise Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
The band on the turn signal/multifunction lever controls your vehicle’s lamps.
2-41
Parking Lamps
This position will turn on the following:
D Parking Lamps
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
Headlamps
This position will turn on the following:
D Headlamps
D Parking Lamps
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the band rearward to turn the lamps off.
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will make your high
beam headlamps come on at reduced brightness in daylight when:
D the ignition is on with the engine running,
D the headlamp switch is OFF,
D the parking brake is released and
D the transaxle is not in PARK (P) on models with an automatic transaxle only.
This indicator light on your instrument panel will come on when the DRL are on.
yellow blue
2-42
yellow blue
A flashing DRL telltale indicates a possible burned out headlamp, or that the vehicle may need service to repair a stuck DRL relay.
When the DRL are on, only your high
beam headlamps will be on at reduced brightness. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When you turn on the headlamp switch, your high
beam headlamps will go out, and your headlamps will come on. The other lamps that come on with your headlamps will also come on.
When you turn off the headlamp switch, the regular lamps will go off, and your high
beam headlamps will come on at reduced brightness.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, set the parking brake. The DRL will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty conditions.
The switch for your fog lamps is next to the instrument panel intensity control.
Push the top of the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Push the bottom of the switch to turn the fog lamps off.
When using fog lamps, the parking lamps or low
beam headlamps must be on.
2-43
Fog lamps will go off whenever the high
beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Intensity Control
yellow blue
Illuminated Entry
When you open either front door, or open a rear door, the lamps inside your vehicle will go on. These lamps will fade off after about 40 seconds, or when the ignition is turned on after all the doors have been closed.
If the ignition has been off for less than two minutes, the lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
15 seconds to provide an illuminated exit when you remove the key from the ignition.
After you exit the vehicle and all of the doors have been closed, the lamps will stay on for an additional four seconds before fading off. These lamps will also go on when you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
You can brighten or dim the instrument panel lights by turning the dial up or down.
Turn the dial up all the way to turn on the interior courtesy lamps.
2-44
Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
These lamps are located on the rearview mirror. Turn each one on and off by pressing its switch.
Map Lamps (If Equipped)
These lamps are located forward of the dome lamp. To turn the lamps on, press the switch. Press the switch again to turn them off.
yellow blue
Battery Saver
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading, dome, glove box, etc.) is left on and the ignition is turned off, the battery rundown protection system will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery. This system does not protect against leaving on the headlamps or parking lamps.
To reactivate the interior lamps, either:
D the ignition must be turned on,
D the activated lamp switch must be turned off, then on, or
D a front door must be opened.
The battery rundown protection feature will also be activated when any door is left open.
2-45
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever toward you to the night position.
Manual Remote Control Mirror
The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
yellow blue
Power Remote Control Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The mirror control is located on the driver’s door.
Rotate the control clockwise or counterclockwise to choose the mirror you want to adjust.
Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the control lever on the driver’s door.
To adjust your passenger’s side mirror, sit in the driver’s seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you.
The mirror is a spring
loaded breakaway design.
2-46
Then move the control in the direction you want the mirror to move. Adjust each mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
The mirror is a spring
loaded breakaway design.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Center Console Storage Area
To open the center console, pull the lift lever up and the lid back.
To close the center console, push the lid down until it clicks.
Center Console Cupholders
Open the center console lid all the way to uncover the front and rear cupholders. There is also a cupholder at the front of the console.
yellow blue
Convenience Net (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger objects behind the net, then re
clip it to secure them in place.
The net isn’t for larger, heavier loads. Store them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re not using it.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
(If Equipped)
To use the lighter, just push it in all the way and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
2-47
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire ashtray and empty it.
To clean the rear ashtray, open it, push down on the snuffer, and pull it out.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also swing them to the side.
Accessory Power Outlet
(If Equipped)
The accessory power outlet is located on the instrument panel to the right of the steering wheel. Just remove the plug from the outlet and follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install.
These circuits are protected by a fuse and have maximum current levels.
yellow blue
2-48
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Press and release the rear of the switch and the glass panel will open to the vent position.
Open the sunshade by hand when using the vent position.
Press and release the rear of the switch again to open the glass panel and the sunshade. Press the front of the switch to stop the panel in any position.
Press and hold the front of the switch to close the glass panel. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if your vehicle has an electrical failure.
yellow blue
Convertible Top (If Equipped)
The following steps explain the proper operation of your convertible top.
NOTICE:
D Remove any items from the convertible top
storage area before you lower the top. Even small items in the storage area can damage the top or other parts of the system.
D Don’t raise or lower the convertible
top when the temperature is below
20
_F (
-
7
_C). The cold can cause cracks
and other damage to the top as it is being lowered or raised.
D Don’t raise or lower the convertible top
while the vehicle is moving. The wind could damage the top. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop before attempting to raise or lower the top. Always make sure that the top is securely latched before driving the vehicle.
2-49
Lowering Your Convertible Top
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Lower the side door windows completely to avoid wear to the weatherstrips.
4. Push the button in the latch handle and turn the handle down to unhook the latch pins from the holes over the windshield.
5. Pull the latch handle rearward away from the windshield and hold it until the convertible top is fully lowered.
yellow blue
2-50
Installing the Boot
yellow blue
6. Rotate the latch handle up to the locked position.
1. From inside the vehicle, pull the tab on the rear seat to fold down the seat. See “Fold
-
Down Rear Seat” in the Index.
2. Open the trunk and remove both boot side covers.
Leave the trunk open.
2-51
3. Install the boot side cover by inserting the tab (A) on the underside of the cover into the slot (B) at the top of the quarter trim panel. Place the rear flap of the boot side cover in the trunk lid opening, aligning the eyelet (C) over the boot snap ball stud (D).
4. Attach the two snaps on the inside flap of the side cover to the top of the quarter trim panel. Attach the front snap (E) first and then the rear snap (F). The rear snap is adjustable for ease of installation.
2-52
yellow blue
yellow blue
5. Pull the boot center cover from behind the rear seatback and place it over the inner sides of the boot side covers and the lowered top.
6. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Place the boot center cover along the trunk lid opening. Align one snap on the corner of the boot to the ball stud and push forward. Repeat for other snap.
7. Close the trunk lid.
8. Raise the rear seatback to the up position. Push the seat back to make sure it is latched.
2-53
Removing the Boot
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Open the trunk and leave it open.
3. From inside the vehicle, fold down the rear seatback.
See “Fold
-
Down Rear Seat” in the Index.
4. Go to the rear of the vehicle. Pull the snap knobs rearward to disengage the rear center cover.
Carefully tuck the center boot behind the rear seatback. Make sure that the center cover is not covering the rear seatback latch. Tuck the end of the center boot rearward to keep it away from the rear seatback hinge.
2-54
yellow blue
yellow blue
5. Unsnap both boot side cover snaps (E and F) from the side of the quarter trim panel.
6. Lift the side cover eyelet (C) at the rear of the side boot cover from the snap ball stud (D). Raise the back of the boot side cover to unhook the tab (A) from the slot (B) in the quarter trim panel. Do the same on the other side.
2-55
7. Store both boot side covers in the trunk.
8. Close the trunk.
9. Raise the rear seatback to the up position. Push the seat back to make sure it is latched. Ensure that the rear seatbelts do not become trapped behind the rear seats.
Raising the Convertible Top
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N).
2. Turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Lower the door windows completely to avoid wear to the weatherstrips.
4. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate the handle down.
5. Push the handle forward toward the windshield and hold it until the convertible top is fully raised, and the latch pins are all the way in the holes above the windshield.
yellow blue
2-56
6. Turn the latch handle up to lock the top. Be sure the top is securely latched on both sides.
yellow blue
Lowering the Top Manually
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to lower the top manually as damage to the vehicle will occur. If the top fails to raise or lower completely, see “Raising the Top
Manually” following.
Raising the Top Manually
If your vehicle loses power, or something else happens that prevents you from raising the top electrically, you may need to raise the top manually. This will allow you to safely drive the vehicle until you can get the top repaired. Raising the convertible top manually should only be done in an emergency and requires two people.
Before you do these steps, check to make sure that the bypass switch in the trunk is switched up to the
NORMAL OPERATION position. If it is not, switch it to the NORMAL OPERATION position and see if the power top works.
2-57
1. Set the parking brake and shift your automatic transaxle to PARK (P) or your manual transaxle to
NEUTRAL (N). Turn the engine off.
2. Push the button in the latch handle and rotate the handle down.
3. Open the trunk.
yellow blue
4. Press the bypass switch down to the EMERGENCY
OVERRIDE position. The switch is located under the shelf panel on the driver’s side in the trunk.
5. Remove the top boot as described in Steps 1 through
9 in “Removing the Boot” earlier in this section.
6. Lower the door windows completely. If the power windows do not work, leave the doors open.
7. Position one person on each side of the vehicle.
Carefully lift the top by grasping the front corners of the top, not the linkage.
NOTICE:
Do not attempt to force the top up if it does not move freely. The top or its linkage can be damaged. Make sure both sides are being lifted together to avoid twisting. See your dealer if you still can’t move the top easily.
Convertible Bypass Switch
2-58
yellow blue
8. Raise the top until it is all the way up. Line up the top so the pins are even with the holes.
9. Pull down on the top and rotate the latch handle up to lock the convertible top. Be sure the top is latched securely on both sides.
10. Press the bypass switch up to the NORMAL
OPERATION position.
11. Close the trunk.
2-59
The Instrument Panel
--
Your Information System
yellow blue
2-60
The main components of your instrument panel are:
A. Instrument Panel Intensity Control
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
C. Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
D. Ignition Switch
E. Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
F. Cigarette Lighter/Accessory Power Outlet
G. Audio System
yellow blue
H. Climate Controls and Rear Window Defogger
I. Shift Lever
J. Parking Brake Lever
K. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever (If Equipped)
L. Hood Release Lever
M. Fuse Panel
2-61
Instrument Panel Clusters
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
yellow blue
2-62
Standard Cluster
yellow blue
Optional Cluster
2-63
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed.
If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer (If Equipped)
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has been driven since you last reset the trip odometer to zero.
The trip odometer reset button is located next to the odometer. By pressing the reset button, you can alternate between the season odometer and the trip odometer. To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the reset button for one to two seconds.
yellow blue
Tachometer (If Equipped)
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the red area, or engine damage may occur.
2-64
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
yellow blue
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
--
and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for about 20 seconds, then it will flash for about 55 seconds. If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will come on.
2-65
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on when you start your engine, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.
Charging System Light
yellow blue
The charging system light will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition, and the engine is not running, as a check to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a loose generator drive belt, or another electrical problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the engine or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-66
yellow blue
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
2-67
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti
lock brake system, this light will come on when you start your engine and it will stay on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti
lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti
lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti
lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
yellow blue
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
(If Equipped)
With the Enhanced Traction
System (ETS), this warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine.
2-68
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come on for the following reasons:
D If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever to FIRST (1) or SECOND (2), the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift lever back to a position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). The warning light should go off. (See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index for more information.)
D The warning light will come on when you set your parking brake with the engine running, and it will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and the warning light stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means there’s a problem with the system.
D If the traction control system is affected by an engine
related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) your vehicle needs service.
yellow blue
Enhanced Traction System Active Light
When your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting wheel spin, this light will come on.
Slippery road conditions may exist if the Enhanced
Traction System active light comes on, so adjust your driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when the system is active.
2-69
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
yellow blue
Low Coolant Warning Light
If this light comes on and stays on, your system is low on coolant and the engine may overheat.
Standard Cluster Optional Cluster
Your vehicle is equipped with one of these gages. With the ignition in RUN, this gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot! It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems on the Road,” this manual shows what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
2-70
See “Engine Coolant” in the Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On
-
Board
Diagnostics
-
Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the CHECK ENGINE light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-71
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
D Light Flashing
--
A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
D Light On Steady
--
An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:
D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
yellow blue
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
2-72
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may notice this as stalling after start
up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.
yellow blue
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine oil pressure problem, this light will stay on after you start your engine, or come on when you are driving. This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
D When the ignition is on but the engine is not running, the light will come on as a test to show you it is working, but the light will go out when you turn the ignition to START. If it doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
D If you’re idling at a stop sign, the light may blink on and then off.
D If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for a moment. This is normal.
2-73
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Passlock
R
Warning Light
This light will come on briefly when you turn the key toward START.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
If the light flashes, the Passlock system has entered a tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see “Passlock” in the Index.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock, and you should see your dealer.
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transaxle)
This light comes on when you need to shift to the next higher gear. See “Manual
Transaxle” in the Index.
2-74
Check Gages Light
This light will come on briefly when you are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving, check your various gages to see if they are in the warning zones or if you are low on fuel.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on, your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left.
yellow blue
When the indicator nears E (empty), you still have a little fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
D At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads F (full).
D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
D The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up.
D The gage doesn’t go back to E (empty) when you turn off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
2-75
✍
NOTES
2-76
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning (If Equipped)
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with Automatic
Tone Control
AM
-
FM Stereo
AM
-
FM Stereo With Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM
-
FM Stereo With Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM
-
FM Stereo With Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Theft
-
Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work for you. The optional climate control system with air conditioning uses ozone
friendly R
-
134a refrigerant.
With these systems, you can control the ventilation and heating in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow
through ventilation system described later in this section.
Standard Climate Control System
yellow blue
Fan Knob
The left knob selects the force of air you want. Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the mode knob all the way counterclockwise to
OFF. In any other setting, the fan will run continuously.
Temperature Knob
The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn this knob toward red
(clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue
(counterclockwise) for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a comfortable setting.
VENT: This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets.
BI
-
LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways. Some air is directed through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.
3-2
FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of the defroster and side window vents.
DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents.
DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air through the defroster and side window vents. Some of the air goes to the floor ducts.
Climate Control System with Air
Conditioning (If Equipped)
yellow blue
Fan Knob
The left knob selects the force of air you want. Turn the knob clockwise to increase fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the mode knob all the way counterclockwise to
OFF. In any other setting, the fan will run continuously.
The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor.
Temperature Knob
The center knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn this knob toward red
(clockwise) for warmer air. Turn it toward blue
(counterclockwise) for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob has several settings to control the direction of airflow. For each setting, set the temperature to a comfortable setting.
MAX: This setting recirculates much of the air inside your vehicle and sends it through the instrument panel outlets. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting when it is needed to help cool the air in the vehicle.
3-3
VENT: This setting brings in outside air and directs it through the instrument panel outlets.
BI
-
LEVEL: This setting brings in outside air and directs it two ways. Some air is directed through the instrument panel outlets. Most of the air is directed through the floor ducts and a little to the defrost and side window vents.
FLOOR: This setting sends most of the air through the ducts near the floor. The rest comes out of the defroster and side window vents.
DEFOG: This setting allows half of the air to go to the floor ducts and half to the defroster and side window vents.
DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air through the defroster and side window vents. Some of the air goes to the floor ducts. The air conditioning compressor will run automatically in this setting when it is needed to help dry the air in the vehicle.
Air Conditioning Compressor Button
Press the A/C button to operate the air conditioner compressor. The indicator light above the button will glow when the air conditioning compressor is running.
You don’t have to press the button to run the compressor in MAX or DEFROST.
3-4
yellow blue
Air Conditioning (If Equipped)
On very hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot, inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down, which should help fuel economy.
For quick cool
down on very hot days, use MAX with the temperature knob all the way in the blue area. If this setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your vehicle may become too dry.
For normal cooling on hot days, use VENT with the temperature knob in the blue area and the A/C button pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and cool it.
On cool, but sunny days, the sun may warm your upper body, but your lower body may not be warm enough.
You can use BI
-
LEVEL with the temperature knob in the middle and the A/C button pushed in. The system will bring in outside air and direct slightly warmer air to your lower body. You may notice this temperature difference more at some times than others.
Heating
On cold days, use FLOOR with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. The system will bring in outside air, heat it and send it to the floor ducts.
Your vehicle has heat ducts that are directed toward the rear seat. Keep the area under the front seats clear of obstructions so the heated air can reach the rear seat passengers.
If your vehicle has an engine coolant heater, you can use it to help your system provide warm air faster when it’s cold outside (0
_F (
-
18
_C) or lower). An engine coolant heater warms the coolant your engine and heating system use to provide heat. See “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.
Defogging and Defrosting
Your system has two settings for clearing the front and side windows. To defrost the windows quickly, use
DEFROST with the temperature knob all the way in the red area. To warm passengers while keeping the windows clean, use DEFOG.
To defog the side windows, set the right control to
BI
-
LEVEL and the fan control to the highest setting.
yellow blue
To defog the side windows while using the air conditioner, set the right control to BI
-
LEVEL, the fan control to the highest setting, and press the A/C button.
For both systems, aim the side vents toward the side windows. For increased airflow to the side vents, close the center vents.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window.
Press the button to turn the defogger on. It will turn itself off after about
10 minutes.
If you turn it on again, the defogger will only run for about five minutes before turning off. You can also turn it off by pressing the button again.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license across the defogger grid on the rear window.
3-5
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or anything else sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air through your vehicle. Your vehicle also has the flow
through ventilation system.
Your vehicle’s flow
through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the air conditioning fan is running.
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and defroster will work far better, reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, adjust the mode knob to FLOOR and the fan to the highest speed for a few moments before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts of snow and moisture and reduces the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects.
This helps air circulate throughout your vehicle.
3-6
yellow blue
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. SET will appear on the display for five seconds. Within five seconds, press and hold the right arrow on the SEEK button until the correct minute appears. Press and hold the left arrow on the SEEK button until the correct hour appears.
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. Press and hold MN until the correct minute appears.
AM-FM Stereo
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency.
3-7
Finding a Station
AM
-
FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.
SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows; SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds.
The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. The radio will scan up or down the radio band, depending on the arrow you pressed first. Press both SEEK arrows or the upper knob to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM
-
FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four numbered buttons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-8
yellow blue
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing, press this button to recall the station frequency.
yellow blue
Finding a Station
AM
-
FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to 21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1, and seven FM2 ).
Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM
-
FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four numbered buttons, within five seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-9
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three more stations may be preset on each band by pressing two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time, within five seconds. Whenever you press the same buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows and P.SCAN will appear on the display. Use P.SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. (If a preset station has weak reception, it will not stop.) Press either SEEK arrow or the upper knob to stop scanning.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease bass.
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
3-10
yellow blue
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player.
If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FADE, BAL,
BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio.
Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
REV: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the left and the tape will reverse rapidly until you press this button again lightly.
FWD: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the right and the tape will rapidly advance until you press this button again lightly.
RECALL: Press this knob to hear the other side of a tape that is playing.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
---
to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
yellow blue
3. Insert the adapter.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR
-
VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously.
3-11
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being played. If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed
-
Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM
-
FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-12
yellow blue
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds, and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM
-
FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1
-
P6) will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
yellow blue
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE button to program AUTO TONE for station presets.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
3-13
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. If a tape is inserted when the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will begin playing. A tape symbol is shown in the center of the graphic display whenever a tape is inserted. When a tape is active, the tape symbol will be accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you do for the radio. Other controls may have different functions when a tape is inserted. The display will show the tape symbol and an arrow to show which side of the tape is playing.
If you hear nothing or hear just a garbled sound, it may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and will eject the tape. The radio will go back to playing the last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette for metal or
CrO
2
and sets the pre
emphasis. Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected to play first.
yellow blue
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to go to the previous selection on the tape if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current selection. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for PREV or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during PREV or SEEK operation. The sound will mute during PREV or SEEK operation. Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to normal play.
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to return to normal play.
3-14
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses.
D (5): Press this button to reduce background noise.
Note that the double
-
D symbol will appear on the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double
-
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances.
AM
-
FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
yellow blue
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
---
to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a CD adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter. It will power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.
3-15
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR
-
VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob is capable of rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being played. If you press the button when the ignition is off, the clock will show for a few seconds.
yellow blue
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed
-
Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
AM
-
FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next higher or lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-16
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds, and SCAN will appear on the display. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM
-
FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that best suits the type of station selected.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the AUTO TONE equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for a few seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations
yellow blue
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P1
-
P6) will appear momentarily just before the frequency is displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and FM1 or FM2 will appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to increase treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
3-17
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset bass and treble equalization settings designed for country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and jazz stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Tone control will return to the BASS and TREB knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs, control will return to them and the AUTO TONE display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS and AUTO TONE button to program AUTO TONE for station presets.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when you’re not using them.
3-18
yellow blue
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing. The display will show CD and the CD symbol. If you want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
RECALL or EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road or if it’s very hot, the disc may not play and ERR (error) may appear on the display. Press RECALL to take ERR off the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play. If the disc comes out, it could be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and try again.)
PREV (1): Press this button or the left SEEK arrow to go to the previous track if the current selection has been playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button is pressed and the current selection has been playing for more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of the current selection. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving back through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will show on the display. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM is reset to off when the disc is ejected.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving forward through the disc. The sound will mute while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse within a track. Release it to play the passage. You can use the counter reading on the display to locate a passage easily.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track. Release it to resume playing. You can use the counter reading on the display to locate a passage easily.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is playing. Press it again within five seconds to see how long it has been playing (elapsed time). The track number also appears when you change the volume or when a new track starts to play.
AM
-
FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player. The letters CD will go off the display.
yellow blue
CD AUX: Press this button to change to the disc function when the radio is on. A CD icon will appear on the display when the disc is in the player, whether it is active or not.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio will play. The disc will start at the first track when you reinsert it.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a disc in the player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the ignition or system, the disc will start playing where it was stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove the disc, the player will pull the disc back in to protect it after about one minute. If you leave a compact disc in the player while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
THEFTLOCK
R
is designed to discourage theft of your radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
3-19
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret code before it will operate.
Activating the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is recommended that you read through all nine steps before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four
digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until
---
shows on the display. Next you will use the secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
yellow blue
6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
8. Press AM
-
FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your secret code.
9. Press AM
-
FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume control will begin flashing when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
3-20
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
5. Press AM
-
FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour with the ignition on before you can try again. When you try again, you will only have three chances to enter the correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft
-
Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down until SEC shows on the display.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree with your code.
yellow blue
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with your code.
7. Press AM
-
FM after you have confirmed that the code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show
---
, indicating that the radio is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the display. The radio will remain secured until the correct code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft
-
Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
3-21
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle
--
like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two
way radio
--
be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.
yellow blue
3-22
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non
abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
yellow blue
When using a scrubbing action, non
abrasive cleaning cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape. To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected, use the following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM
-
FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM
-
FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3-23
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non
scrubbing action, wet
type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non
scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non
scrubbing action, dry
type cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display
---
to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
yellow blue
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes without being damaged. If the mast should ever become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still tightened to the fender.
3-24
yellow blue
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off
-
Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer (Models with 2.4L
L4 Engine and 4
-
Speed Automatic Transaxle)
Towing a Trailer (Except Models with 2.4L
L4 Engine and 4
-
Speed Automatic Transaxle)
4-
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
yellow blue
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear
end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task
--
such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor
--
makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
4-2
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
D Judgment
D Muscular Coordination
D Vision
D Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle
related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle
related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults
--
by some estimates, nearly half the adult population
--
choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.
yellow blue
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180
lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12
ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4
ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1
-
1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
yellow blue
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
4-4
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking
--
driver or passenger
--
is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious
--
or even fatal
--
collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
yellow blue
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts
--
heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking
--
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
yellow blue
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti
lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive away, your anti
lock brake system will check itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with the anti
lock brake system, this warning light will stay on.
See “Anti
-
Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti
lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.
yellow blue
Here’s how anti
lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Remember: Anti
lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti
lock brakes.
Using Anti
-
Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti
lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.
yellow blue
Enhanced Traction System
If your vehicle has the optional four
speed automatic transaxle, it also has an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only when the transaxle shift lever is in the REVERSE (R),
THIRD (3) or OVERDRIVE (
B) position and the system senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system reduces engine power and may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
This light will come on when your Enhanced
Traction System is limiting wheel spin. See “Enhanced
Traction System Active
Light” in the Index.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
4-9
When the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and the parking brake is fully released, this warning light will come on to let you know if there’s a problem with the system.
See “Enhanced Traction System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The Enhanced Traction System can operate when the transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2). To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should use the other shift lever positions only when necessary. See
“Automatic Transaxle” in the Index. (If your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, see “Rocking
Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
yellow blue
When you move the shift lever to FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2), the system will turn off. The Enhanced
Traction System warning light will come on and stay on.
If the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin when you move the shift lever to another position, the system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by moving the shift lever to any position other than FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2). The Enhanced Traction System warning light should go off.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti
lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
4-10
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems
--
steering and acceleration
--
have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.
yellow blue
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
yellow blue
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking
--
if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action
--
steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off
-
Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to one
quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
yellow blue
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two
lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two
lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents
--
the head
on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-13
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.
yellow blue
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two
lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
4-14
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
yellow blue
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the transaxle shift lever is not in the OVERDRIVE (
B) position, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues
--
such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface”
--
and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti
lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired
--
by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
4-16
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
yellow blue
Night Vision
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50
year
old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20
year
old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
yellow blue
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean
--
inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness
--
the inability to see in dim light
--
and aren’t even aware of it.
4-17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
yellow blue
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire
to
road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
4-19
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
(See “Tires” in the Index.)
4-20
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.
yellow blue
yellow blue
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross
country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too
fast or too
slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-21
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
4-22
yellow blue
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh
--
such as after a day’s work
--
don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble
free trip. Is the tread good enough for long
distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up
to
date maps?
yellow blue
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
yellow blue
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle.
These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
4-24
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two
lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no
passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk.
4-25
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-26
yellow blue
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32
_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition or loose snow
--
smooth ice, packed, blowing
--
drive with caution.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the transaxle shift lever in the OVERDRIVE (
B) position so the system will be able to operate. It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has this system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions. See “Enhanced Traction System” in the Index.
If you don’t have the Enhanced Traction System, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.
yellow blue
Your anti
lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti
lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti
-
Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-27
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
yellow blue
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats
--
anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-28
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.
yellow blue
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well
charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
You can tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for use at your destination. Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed for recreational towing. Follow the instructions for towing equipment.
4-29
Towing Your Vehicle from the Front 3-Speed
Automatic Transaxle (With a Dolly)
Follow these steps:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Open the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. Remove the fuse labeled
CLS/PCM. This will keep your battery from draining while towing. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
4-30
yellow blue
4. Turn the ignition key to OFF to unlock the steering wheel. See ”Ignition Positions” in the Index.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight
ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
When you are finished towing, make sure you replace the CLS/PCM fuse in the instrument panel fuse block.
Towing Your Vehicle From the Front
4-Speed Automatic and 5-Speed Manual
Transaxles (Without a Dolly)
You may tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground for unlimited miles if you have a four
speed automatic or a five
speed manual transaxle. If your vehicle has a three
speed automatic transaxle, it may not be towed in this manner. To tow a vehicle with a four
speed automatic or a five
speed manual transaxle, follow these steps:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Open the fuse panel on the driver’s side of the instrument panel. Remove the fuse labeled
CLS/PCM. This will keep your battery from draining while towing. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
yellow blue
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF to unlock the steering wheel.
4. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
5. Release the parking brake.
When you are finished towing, make sure you replace the CLS/PCM fuse in the instrument panel fuse block.
NOTICE:
Make sure that the towing speed does not exceed
65 mph (110 km/h), or your vehicle could be badly damaged.
4-31
Towing Your Vehicle from the Rear
All Transaxles
Loading Your Vehicle
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Your vehicle could be badly damaged and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire
-
Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the Vehicle Capacity Weight, and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory
installed options.
4-32
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. Don’t carry more than 132 lbs. (60 kg) in your trunk.
If you put things inside your vehicle
--
like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else
--
they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-33
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
D Put things in the trunk or rear area of your
vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward as you can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
If you have fold
down rear seats, you’ll find four anchors on the back wall of your trunk. You can use these anchors to tie down lighter loads. They’re not strong enough for heavy things, however, so put them as far forward as you can in the trunk or rear area.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
4-34
yellow blue
Towing a Trailer (Models with
2.4L L4 Engine and 4
-
Speed
Automatic Transaxle)
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well
--
or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured. You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a
2.2L L4 (Code 4) engine. You also cannot tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a manual or a three
speed automatic transaxle, or is a convertible model.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with a
2.4L L4 engine and 4 speed automatic transaxle and the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time
tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load
pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
yellow blue
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
D Do not tow when the ambient temperature is above
100
_F (38_C).
D Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km) per year.
4-35
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg). But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007
-
7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
yellow blue
4-36
If you’re using a weight
carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a weight
distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
yellow blue
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Tire
-
Loading Information Label at the rear edge of the driver’s door, or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper
type hitches to it. Use only a frame
mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index). Dirt and water can, too.
4-37
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly. Because you have anti
lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
yellow blue
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-38
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
yellow blue
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
4-39
yellow blue
Driving On Grades
NOTICE:
Do not tow on steep continuous grades exceeding
6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than normal engine and transaxle temperatures may result and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops are very important to allow the engine and transaxle to cool.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle overheating.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning (if you have this option) to reduce engine load (see “Engine
Overheating” in the Index).
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-40
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
yellow blue
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
Towing A Trailer (Except Models with 2.4L L4 Engine and 4
-
Speed
Automatic Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is:
D a convertible model,
D equipped with a 2.2L L4 (Code 4) engine or
D equipped with a manual transaxle or a three automatic transaxle.
speed
4-41
✍
NOTES
4-42
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
Cooling System
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
yellow blue
Move the switch to the right to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, move the switch to the left.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.
5-2
yellow blue
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please use the following steps below to do it safely.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
The ACDelco Freedom
R
battery in your vehicle has a built
in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12
volt battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12
volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL (N) before setting the parking brake.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio.
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5. Find the positive (+) and negative (
-
) terminals on each battery.
yellow blue
5-4
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco Freedom
R
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
yellow blue
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative (
-
) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (
-
) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too.
6. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
7. Remove the red plastic cap, and connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-5
yellow blue
8. Don’t let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (
-
) cable to the good battery’s negative (
-
) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (
-
) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery.
10. Attach the cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. The electrical connection is just as good there, but the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
It goes to a heavy unpainted metal part on the engine of the vehicle with the dead battery.
5-6
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
11. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
13. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
yellow blue
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is
being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not
fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel-lift or car carrier equipment.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
5-8
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a low coolant warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant Temperature Gage” and
“Low Coolant Warning Light” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
5-9
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D Climb a long hill on a hot day.
D Stop after high
speed driving.
D Idle for long periods in traffic.
D Tow a trailer.
yellow blue
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving
--
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for four
speed automatic transaxles or DRIVE (D) for three
speed automatic transaxles.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
5-10
yellow blue
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:
2.2L L4 Engine
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
2.4L L4 Engine
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
5-11
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
yellow blue
The coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
5-12
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX
-
COOL
R
(silicate
free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX
-
COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX
-
COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it isn’t, your vehicle needs service.
yellow blue
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX
-
COOL
R
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
5-13
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge tank pressure cap
--
even a little
--
they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-14
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX
-
COOL
R
coolant.
NOTICE:
yellow blue
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. So use the recommended coolant.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-15
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise (left) about two or two and one
half turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
5-16
yellow blue
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and remove it.
yellow blue
3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-17
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand
tight.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling system has cooled down. If the coolant isn’t at the proper level, repeat Steps 1 to 3 and reinstall the pressure cap or see your dealer.
yellow blue
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop
--
well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-18
yellow blue
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.
5-19
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk. Turn the center retainer nut on the compact spare cover counterclockwise to remove it.
Lift and remove the cover. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the compact spare.
Turn the wing bolt counterclockwise and remove it. Then lift off the adapter and remove the spare tire.
yellow blue
Remove the jack and wheel wrench from the trunk. Your vehicle’s jack and wheel wrench are stored in a foam tray. Remove the band around the jack.
5-20
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).
yellow blue
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench, remove the plastic nut caps (if equipped).
5-21
2. On some models, a cover plate must be removed to find the wheel nuts. Carefully use the wedge end of the wheel wrench to pry it off.
3. Then use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them yet.
4. Near each wheel well is a notch in the frame which the jack head fits in. The front notch is 9 inches
(23 cm) back from the front wheel well. The rear notch is 8 inches (20 cm) forward from the rear wheel well. As is shown in the diagram above, if your vehicle has flared side moldings, both front and rear notches are 18 inches (46 cm) from the wheel wells.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-22
yellow blue
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
6. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
5-23
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
yellow blue
7. If you have a wheel cover, use your fingers to carefully pull the wheel cover from the wheel. Then remove the flat tire.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-24
yellow blue
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Place the spare on the wheel
mounting surface.
10. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand or with the wheel wrench until the wheel is held against the hub.
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-25
5-26
12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss
cross sequence, as shown.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb
ft (140 N
Sm).
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare tire. It won’t fit.
Store the wheel cover and wheel nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
yellow blue
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
5-27
yellow blue
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
A. Wrench
B. Jack
C. Flat Road Tire
D. Adapter
E. Extension
F. Wing Bolt
(Extension Installed)
G. Cover
H. Nut
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire compartment and secure the adapter, extension (aluminum wheel only) and wing bolt. Store the jack and wheel wrench in the foam tray.
5-28
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full
size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” in the Index. See the storage instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly.
A. Wrench
B. Jack
C. Spare Tire
D. Adapter
E. Wing Bolt
F. Cover
G. Nut
yellow blue
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi
(420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full
size tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full
size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
5-29
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.
yellow blue
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
5-30
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
yellow blue
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear
(or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-31
✍
NOTES
5-32
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(Three
-
Speed Only)
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (Four
-
Speed Only)
Manual Transaxle Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Thermostat
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM
trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
yellow blue
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag
-
Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
yellow blue
Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines. For more information, write to: American Automobile Manufacturer’s
Association, 7430 Second Ave, Suite 300,
Detroit MI 48202.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.
6-3
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog
check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Chevrolet dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane
enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Chevrolet dealer for service.
yellow blue
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.
6-4
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
yellow blue
Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.
The cap is behind a hinged door on the right side of your vehicle.
6-5
While refueling, hang the tethered cap inside the fuel door by placing the fuel cap strap in the strap hanger.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
yellow blue
6-6
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
yellow blue
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
6-7
Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
Hood Release
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
yellow blue
To open the hood, first pull the handle inside the vehicle on the driver’s side under the instrument panel.
6-8
yellow blue
Lift the hood, release the hood prop from its retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the hood marked
“prop rod.”
Use the prop rod sleeve when handling the hood prop.
Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the secondary hood release handle. The secondary hood release lever is located near the front center of the hood toward the driver’s side.
To make sure that the secondary hood release handle works properly, lubricate the hood latch at least once a year.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood
8 to 10 inches (20 to 25 cm) above the vehicle and release so that it will latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed and repeat if necessary.
6-9
2.2L L4 Engine (Code 4)
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap/Dipstick
D. Brake Fluid Reservoir
6-10
E. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
Reservoir (If Equipped)
F. Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Dipstick (If Equipped)
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
H. Battery
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
yellow blue
yellow blue
2.4L L4 Engine (Code T)
When you open the hood, you’ll see:
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap
C. Engine Oil Dipstick
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir
F. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
Reservoir (If Equipped)
G. Battery
H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
I. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir
6-11
Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Check the oil here if you have a 2.2L engine.
Check the oil here if you have a 2.4L engine. The dipstick’s handle will be a yellow ring.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
yellow blue
6-12
Checking Engine Oil
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
This is where you add oil if you have a 2.2L engine.
6-13
This is where you add oil if you have a 2.4L engine.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.
yellow blue
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the “Starburst” symbol. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the Starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is American Petroleum Institute certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
yellow blue
As shown in the chart, SAE 5W
-
30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W to be 0
_F (
-
30 if it’s going
-
18
_C) or above. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W
-
50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
“Starburst” symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench
R
oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
-
20
_F (
-
29
_C), consider using either an SAE 5W
-
30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W
-
30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
6-15
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop
and
go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months
--
whichever occurs first.
yellow blue
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months
--
whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free
flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.
6-16
yellow blue
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The air cleaner is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment near the battery.
To check or replace the filter, remove the screws that hold the cover on and lift the cover. Be sure to reinstall the air cleaner filter and replace the cover tightly.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-17
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.
yellow blue
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(Three
-
Speed Only)
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
6-18
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.
yellow blue
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
D At high speed for quite a while.
D In heavy traffic
--
especially in hot weather.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180
_F to 200_F (82_C to 93
_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50
_F
(10
_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have to drive longer.
6-19
Checking the Fluid Level
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
1. If you have a three
speed automatic transaxle, the handle on the transaxle dipstick is a red ring. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross
hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way.
yellow blue
6-20
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross
hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long
neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON
R
-
III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON
R
-
III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
yellow blue
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
(Four
-
Speed Only)
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service department and have it repaired as soon as possible. You may also have your fluid level checked by your dealer or service center when you have your oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles (83
000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
6-21
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON
R
-
III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON
R
-
III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your manual transaxle doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at your Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your manual transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the vehicle is parked on a level place and the manual transaxle is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the transaxle case.
6-22
yellow blue
Then, follow these steps:
1. The manual transaxle dipstick is located below the brake master cylinder, near the rear of the transaxle case. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and clean it with a rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way and remove it.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. The fluid level must be between the ADD and
FULL marks. (Note: Fluid may appear at the bottom of the dipstick even when the fluid level is several pints low.)
4. If the fluid level is where it should be, push the dipstick back in all the way and flip the handle down. If the fluid level is low, add more fluid as described in the next steps.
6-23
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Remove the dipstick by flipping the handle up and then pulling the dipstick out.
2. Add fluid at the dipstick hole.
Add only enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to the FULL mark on the dipstick.
3. Push the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is self
adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It isn’t a good idea to “top off” your clutch fluid. Adding fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often you should check the fluid level in your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
yellow blue
6-24
How to Check
You do not need to check the fluid level unless you suspect a clutch problem. To check the fluid level, take the cap off. If the fluid reaches the step inside the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your surge tank cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure
type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating.
When you replace your surge tank pressure cap, a GM cap is recommended.
Thermostat
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat in the engine coolant system. The thermostat stops the flow of coolant through the radiator until the coolant reaches a preset temperature.
When you replace your thermostat, an ACDelco
R thermostat is recommended.
yellow blue
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX
-
COOL
R
engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX
-
COOL
R
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX
-
COOL
R
coolant will:
D Give freezing protection down to
-
34
_F (
-
37
_C).
D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
D Protect against rust and corrosion.
D Help keep the proper engine temperature.
D Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
6-25
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX
-
COOL
R
(silicate
free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX
-
COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner
--
at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX
-
COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one
half clean, drinkable water and one
half DEX
-
COOL
R
coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX
-
COOL
R
coolant.
yellow blue
6-26
yellow blue
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The surge tank is located on the passenger’s side of the engine compartment.
6-27
CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap
--
even a little
--
when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means you’re low on engine coolant.
See “Low Coolant Light” in the Index.
yellow blue
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX
-
COOL
R coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the engine is cool.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand
tight.
6-28
Power Steering Fluid
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
yellow blue
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the C mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
6-29
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap labeled
WASHER FLUID ONLY.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
D Don’t mix water with ready
to
use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
D Fill your washer fluid tank only
three
quarters full when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.
yellow blue
6-30
Brakes
Brake Fluid
yellow blue
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. It is filled with DOT
-
3 brake fluid.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. See “Brake System Warning
Light” in the Index.
6-31
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT
-
3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral
based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
yellow blue
6-32
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built
in wear indicators that make a high
pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn
out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
yellow blue
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” in
Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
6-33
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then
--
very carefully
--
make a few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles (1
600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
If your brake pedal goes down farther than normal, your rear drum brakes may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top
quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
yellow blue
system
--
for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in
--
be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change
--
for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with an ACDelco Freedom
R battery. When it’s time for a new battery, we recommend an ACDelco Freedom battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative (
-
) cable from the battery. This will help keep your battery from running down.
6-34
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft
-
Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
yellow blue
Bulb Replacement
The following procedures tell you how to replace the bulbs for your vehicle.
For the type of bulb to use, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your Chevrolet dealer’s service department.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-35
yellow blue
Headlamps
1. Remove the first bolt. Then remove the remaining plastic fasteners holding the shield. Use the end of a flat
head screwdriver to pull up the center of the fastener. Be careful not to break the fasteners that hold the shield in place.
2. Remove the other bolt that anchors the headlamp assembly. Pull the headlamp assembly toward the front of the vehicle to access the bulb assembly.
When replacing the driver’s side headlamp, twist the bulb assembly one
eighth of a turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly.
When replacing the passenger’s side headlamp, twist the bulb assembly one
eighth of a turn clockwise and remove it from the headlamp assembly.
6-36
3. Disconnect the bulb base from the socket by lifting the plastic locking tab.
4. Snap a new bulb into the socket.
5. Replace the bulb assembly by reversing Steps 1 through 3, making sure the lower leg of the headlamp bracket is properly seated into the wedge
shaped retainer.
yellow blue
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(Models Without a Spoiler)
To change the bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk and view the access hole under the rear shelf.
2. Remove the bulb sockets by turning and pull down.
3. Remove the bulb and replace.
4. Re
install the new bulb and socket into the CHMSL.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(Models With a Spoiler)
To change the bulb, do the following:
1. Use a TORX
R
screwdriver to unscrew the bulb assembly from the spoiler.
2. Gently pull out the bulb assembly.
3. Remove the bulb(s) by gently wiggling the bulb from the assembly.
4. Replace the bulb(s) and reverse these steps to replace the bulb assembly.
6-37
Taillamps and Rear Turn Signal Lamps
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the fastener which holds down the trunk trim. On vehicles without a convenience net, pry the fastener loose. On vehicles with a convenience net, remove the net and unscrew the fastener. Then pull down the trunk trim.
2. Remove the assembly by turning it one
quarter of a turn counterclockwise.
3. To remove the bulb, pull it out.
4. Push in a new bulb.
5. Reverse all steps to replace the taillamp assembly.
6-38
yellow blue
Back-Up Lamps
To replace a back
up lamp, do the following:
1. Open the trunk lid and locate the back
up lamp assembly on the trunk lid.
2. Gently remove the bulb from the socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it out.
3. Replace the bulb in the socket by aligning the tabs and turning clockwise.
Dome Lamp with Integral Reading Lamps
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot at the rear of the lens.
2. With the screwdriver, push the tab rearward to release the lamp lens.
3. Push the lens forward to release the two tabs at the front of the lens.
4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens.
yellow blue
Dome Lamp without Integral
Reading Lamps
To replace a bulb, do the following:
1. From the rear of the dome lamp lens, insert a flat screwdriver between the roof trim and the lens.
2. With the screwdriver, push the tab at the rear of the lens forward to release the lens.
3. Pull the lamp lens rearward to release the two front tabs.
4. Gently remove and replace the bulb(s).
5. Reverse these steps to replace the lens.
6-39
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in Section 7 of this manual under Part B “Owner
Checks and Services” for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For the proper type and length, see “Capacities and Specifications” in the Index.
Here’s how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
yellow blue
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high
quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air
out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield.
6-40
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact
--
such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire
-
Loading Information label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
yellow blue
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
6-41
yellow blue
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket
type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.
6-42
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
-
Loading
Information label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off. (See
“Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
yellow blue
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
6-43
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire
-
Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all
season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type (bias, bias
belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-44
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias
belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias
ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial
ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
yellow blue
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.) The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter
type snow tires, space
saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited
production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
yellow blue
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
--
AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight
ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-45
Temperature
--
A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
yellow blue
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load
carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
6-46
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P195/65R15 or P205/55R16 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-47
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
6-48
yellow blue
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D Gasoline
D Benzene
D Naphtha
D Carbon Tetrachloride
D Acetone
D Paint Thinner
D Turpentine
D Lacquer Thinner
D Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous
--
some more than others
--
and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D Alcohol
D Laundry Soap
D Bleach
D Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi
-
Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non
-
Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM
approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can
--
before they set.
yellow blue
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-49
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi
purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi
-
Purpose Interior Cleaner.
yellow blue
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery that has been treated with
Scotchgard t Fabric Protector, a 3M product. It protects fabrics by repelling oil and water, which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this protection, you still need to clean your upholstery often to keep it looking new.
Further information on cleaning is available by calling
1
-
800
-
433
-
3296 (in Minnesota, 1
-
800
-
642
-
6167).
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
6-50
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. (See
“Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
yellow blue
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami
R
Powder (non
scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full
strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.
6-51
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get GM
approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance
Care and Materials” in the Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all
cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
6-52
yellow blue
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM
approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non
abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non
abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
yellow blue
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Your convertible top should be cleaned often. If you use an automatic car wash, use one with water jets and hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash the top, do it in partial shade. Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge. A chamois or cloth may leave lint on the top, and a brush can chafe the threads in the top fabric. Don’t use detergents, harsh cleaners, solvents or bleaching agents.
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly to avoid spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the fabric for a few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use a mild foam
type cleaner. Thoroughly rinse the entire vehicle, then let the top dry in direct sunlight.
6-53
To protect the convertible top:
D After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is completely dry before you lower it.
D Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s painted finish; it could leave streaks.
D If you decide to go through an automatic car wash, ask the manager if the equipment could damage your top.
Before entering a car wash, set the climate control to
VENT and the fan control to the highest speed. This will help to prevent water under high pressure from entering around the convertible top.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
(If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
yellow blue
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome
plated wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum
based products may damage the paint finish and tires.
6-54
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti
corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch
up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
yellow blue
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet
shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
6-55
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052918**
1052925
1052929
1052930
12345721
12345725
12377964*
12377966*
12377984*
SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
8 oz. (0.237 L)
2.5 sq. ft.
12 oz. (0.354 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner
23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Armor All t Protectant
Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
Wheel Cleaner
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Synthetic Chamois
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Cleaner Wax
Surface Cleaner
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
yellow blue
6-56
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
yellow blue
D the model designation,
D paint information and
D a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
D your VIN,
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add
on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag
-
Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
6-57
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp system checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuse
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
yellow blue
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver
colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without
--
like the radio or cigarette lighter
--
and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the instrument panel fuse block and the engine compartment fuse block.
6-58
yellow blue
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse panel is located at the left end of the instrument panel. To open, push the tab on the access door to the left and pull the door forward. Make sure to insert the tabs when replacing the cover.
Fuse
TRN
-
B/L
F/P
-
INJ
RR DFOG
CLUSTER
CLS/PCM
Usage
Exterior Lamps, Back
-
Up Lamps
Fuel Pump, Fuel Injectors
Rear Window Defogger
Instrument Cluster, Anti
-
Lock
Brake System
Instrument Cluster, Powertrain
Control Module, Daytime
Running Lamps
6-59
Fuse
O
2
HTR
WIPER
ERLS
AIR BAG
PWR ACC
EXT LAMP
HVAC
RADIO
ALARM
CRUISE
STOP HAZ
Usage
Rear O
2
Sensor Heater
Windshield Wipers,
Windshield Washers
Automatic Transaxle, Brake
Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI),
A/C Compressor, Cruise Control,
Multiport Fuel Injection
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
(SIR) System
Power Door Locks, Convertible
Top (Convertible Model Only)
Exterior Lamps, Instrument
Panel Lights
Heater and A/C Control, Engine
Cooling Fan
Radio, Remote Keyless Entry
Alarm Module, Interior Lamps,
Warning Chimes
Cruise Control
Exterior Lamps, Anti
-
Lock Brake
System, Cruise Control,
Turn Signals
6-60
Fuse Usage
CIG
INST LPS
Cigarette Lighter
Instrument Panel Lights,
Warning Chimes
Powertrain Control Module PCM/IGN
L HDLP
INT LAMP
Left Headlamp, Fog Lamp
(Z
-
24 Model Only)
Alarm Module: Illuminated Entry,
Warning Chimes, Overhead
Lamps, Map/Reading Lamps,
Glove Box Lamp, Trunk Lamp,
Radio, Power Mirrors, Remote
Keyless Entry
Engine Ignition IGN
R HDLP Right Headlamp, Fog Lamp
(Z
-
24 Model Only)
HORN Horn, Diagnostic Connector
PWR WDO/SRF Power Windows, Power Sunroof,
Convertible Top Controls
(Convertible Model Only)
(Circuit Breaker)
DRL Daytime Running Lamps (Relay)
yellow blue
yellow blue
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. Lift off the cover to check the fuses.
Fuse
IGN
BATT 1
PCM
A/C
ABS/EVO
Usage
Ignition Switch Circuits
Power ACC/Stoplamp Circuits
BATT 2
ABS
Lighting Circuits
Anti
-
Lock Brake System
COOLING FAN Engine Cooling Fan
BLO Heater and A/C Blower
Powertrain Control Module
A/C Compressor
Anti
-
Lock Brake System
6-61
Replacement Bulbs
Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Number
Back
-
Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
Base Model
Z
-
24 Model
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3357
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3357NA
Center High
-
Mount Stoplamp
With Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Without Spoiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
912
1141
Halogen Headlamps, High/Low Beam
Tail/Turn Signal Lamps
. . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9005/6
3057
Dome/Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
Base Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Up
-
Level Model
912
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 & 906
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in
English and metric conversions. Please refer to
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
yellow blue
Engine Crankcase
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transaxle (3
-
Speed)
Pan Removal and Replacement . . .
After Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . .
4.0 quarts (3.8 L)
4.0 quarts (3.8 L)
6.9 quarts (6.5 L)
When draining or replacing torque converter, more fluid may be needed.
Automatic Transaxle
(4
-
Speed)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Not Owner Serviceable
Manual Transaxle
Complete Drain and Refill
Cooling System
2.2L
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.0 quarts (1.9 L)
10.3 quarts (9.7 L)
2.4L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 quarts (10.1 L)
Refrigerant (R
-
134a),
Air Conditioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See refrigerant
charge label under hood.
Fuel Tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.0 gallons (56.8 L)
Tire Pressures, Sizes
. . . . . . . . . . . See Tire
-
Loading
Wheel Nut Torque
Information label on driver’s door.
. . . . . . . . . . 100 lb
ft (140 N·m)
NOTE: All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
6-62
2.2L Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
L4
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 @ 5,000 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .
1
-
3
-
4
-
2
180
_ F (82_C)
2.4L Engine Specifications
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
T
L4
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 @ 5,600 rpm
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat Temperature . . . . . . . . . . .
1
-
3
-
4
-
2
180
_ F (82_C)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used.
If you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
See the refrigerant charge label under the hood for information regarding refrigerant capacity.
yellow blue
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter
2.2L
2.4L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Type A
-
1172C
AC Type A
-
1172C
Engine Oil Filter
2.2L
2.4L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF
-
47
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF
-
44
Spark Plugs
2.2L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41
-
928
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gap: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm)
2.4L
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41
-
942
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gap: 0.050 inch (1.27 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blade (Shepherd’s Hook Type)
Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 inches (56 cm)
Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 inches (43 cm)
6-63
Vehicle Dimensions
Length
All Models
Width
All Models
Height
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
180.3 inches (458.0 cm)
75.4 inches (191.5 cm)
Coupe
Sedan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53.2 inches (135.1 cm)
54.9 inches (139.4 cm)
Convertible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.9 inches (136.9 cm)
yellow blue
Wheelbase
All Models
Front Tread
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.1 inches (264.4 cm)
All Models
Rear Tread
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57.6 inches (146.3 cm)
All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.8 inches (144.3 cm)
6-64
yellow blue
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.
Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.
yellow blue
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
7-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know
how and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.
yellow blue
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place for you to record the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be sure to write it down in this part. This will help you determine when your next maintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance receipts. They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your vehicle, you will probably want to get the service information. See “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM
trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
yellow blue
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire
-
Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow:
7-4
yellow blue
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop
and
go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle. (With some models, you should never tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.)
D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Chassis Lubrication
(or 6 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance is true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Chassis Lubrication (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages.
yellow blue
7-6
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage and the transaxle shift linkage.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your brake calipers may require additional inspection and service, at every other tire rotation. See “Caliper/Knuckle
Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7-7
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-8
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-10
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-12
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F
(32
_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-13
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-14
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
7-16
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-17
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
87,000 Miles (145 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
7-18
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 6 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-19
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code T L4 engine).
An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F
(32
_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-20
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage and the transaxle shift linkage.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
++ If you drive in a highly corrosive environment, your brake calipers may require additional inspection and service, at every other tire rotation. See “Caliper/Knuckle
Maintenance Inspection” under “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7-21
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
7-22
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.) j Replace air cleaner filter. An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F
(32
_C) or higher.
7-24
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
yellow blue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.)
(Continued)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-25
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
7-26
yellow blue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-27
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
(Also see footnote ++.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. j Lubricate chassis components (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
(See footnote #.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
yellow blue
7-28
yellow blue
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
j Inspect spark plug wires (except 2.4L Code T L4 engine).
An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F
(32
_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Manual transaxle fluid doesn’t require change.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-29
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in
Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX
-
COOL
R coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
See “Tires” in the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
yellow blue
7-30
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
yellow blue
Manual Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. Check for leaks.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transaxle Check (Three
-
Speed Only)
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.
Automatic Transaxle Inspection (Four
-
Speed Only)
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
Check for leaks. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your Chevrolet dealership Service Department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired at once.
7-31
yellow blue
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assemblies, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hood and body door hinges, rear compartment and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway and try to start the engine. The starter should work only when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch isn’t pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
7-32
Brake
-
Transaxle Shift Interlock (BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transaxle)
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake
(see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle’s BTSI needs service.
yellow blue
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D With an automatic transaxle, the key should turn to
LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
D With a manual transaxle, the key should turn to LOCK only when you press the key release the button.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. It should only lock when turned to the right.
7-33
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
yellow blue
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then release all brakes.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.
7-34
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook
up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
yellow blue
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out
of
position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build
up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
7-35
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook
up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection
If you operate your vehicle in a highly corrosive environment, as indicated by the shaded areas on the map following this text, your vehicle may require additional brake service. Refer to the appropriate GM
Service Bulletin for the proper caliper inspection procedure. As necessary, caliper pins and knuckle brake
yellow blue
pad abutments should be lubricated at every other tire rotation. Also, see your GM dealer’s service department or qualified service center for additional information.
X–02–0078–V
7-36
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst” symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only GM
Goodwrench
R
DEX
Havoline
R
DEX
-
-
COOL
COOL
R
R
or
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Delco Supreme 11
R
Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT
-
3 Brake Fluid).
yellow blue
USAGE
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Hydraulic Clutch
System
Power Steering
System
Manual
Transaxle
Automatic
Transaxle
Key Lock
Cylinders
Manual
Transaxle Shift
Linkage
FLUID/LUBRICANT
GM Optikleen
R
Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT
-
3 Brake Fluid).
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884
-
1 pint,
1050017
-
1 quart, or equivalent).
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345349 or equivalent).
DEXRON
R
-
III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi
-
Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC
-
LB.
7-37
USAGE
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Chassis
Lubrication
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI # 2, Category LB or
GC
-
LB.
Lubriplate
R
Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC
-
LB.
USAGE
Hood and Door
Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Multi
-
Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
yellow blue
7-38
yellow blue
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-39
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
yellow blue
7-40
yellow blue
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Service and Owner Publications in Canada
8-
8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
yellow blue
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
yellow blue
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you must file with the GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information booklet for information on the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
8-3
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll
free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203
-
1804
Telephone: 1
-
800
-
955
-
5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
yellow blue
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech
impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1
-
800
-
833
-
CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1
-
800
-
263
-
3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
R
8-4
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC
-
Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax: 905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
yellow blue
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1
-
800
-
323
-
9935.
-
800
-
833
-
9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1
-
800
-
GM
-
DRIVE (463
-
7483) for details. TTY users call 1
-
800
-
263
-
3830. When calling from the United
States, please dial 1
-
905
-
644
-
3063.
8-5
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 1999 Chevrolet, membership in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1
-
800
-
CHEV-USA
(1
-
800
-
243
-
8872). This toll-free number will provide you over
the
phone roadside assistance with minor mechanical
8-6
yellow blue
problems. If your problem cannot be resolved over the phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside membership is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:
D Toll
free number, 1
-
800
-
CHEV
-
USA
D Free towing for warranty repairs
D Basic over
the
phone technical advice
D Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e., wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non
-
Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)
D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty to eligible purchasers of 1999 Chevrolet passenger cars and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease customers operating 1999 and newer Chevrolet vehicles for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must be pre
arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that will provide you with quality and priority service. When roadside services are required, our advisors will explain any payment obligations that may be incurred for utilizing outside services.
yellow blue
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the following available to give to the advisor:
D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D License plate number
D Vehicle color
D Vehicle location
D Telephone number where you can be reached
D Vehicle mileage
D Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure inside your owner information portfolio for full program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1
-
800
-
268
-
6800 for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealerships are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If it is determined that your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately and is still operative, you are encouraged to drive the vehicle until scheduling can be accomplished.
yellow blue
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealerships can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
8-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements. Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like
vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper
to
-
Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
yellow blue
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealerships and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
General Motors and participating dealerships reserve the right to deny a rental vehicle to anyone not possessing a valid motor vehicle operators license in their name, anyone who is under the influence of alcohol or drugs, or anyone whose mental or physical abilities are impaired so as to be unable to operate a motor vehicle safely.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.
8-9
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll
free at 1
-
800
-
424
-
9393 (or 366
-
0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.
yellow blue
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1
-
800
-
222
-
1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007
-
7047
In Canada, please call us at 1
-
800
-
263
-
3777 (English) or 1
-
800
-
263
-
7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
yellow blue
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals and other service literature are available for purchase for all current and past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
8-11
yellow blue
1999 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 1999 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1999 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $10.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated
S
P.O. Box 07130
S
Detroit, MI 48207
8-12
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
9
9
1
9
yellow blue
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
TOTAL
PRICE
1999 $90.00
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
1999 $50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 1999 $15.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 1999 $10.00
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED
S
P.O. Box 07130
S
Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(ATTENTION)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
GM-CHE-ORD99
(ZIP CODE) (STATE)
( )
AREA CODE
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)
MasterCard
VISA
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
$5.00
Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
U.S. order processing.
✍
NOTES
8-14
yellow blue
yellow blue
Section 9 Index
A
ccessory Power Outlet
Adapter Kit, CD
Air Bag
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Does it Restrain
How it Works
Location
Readiness Light
Servicing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What Makes it Inflate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle
What Will You See After it Inflates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When Should it Inflate
Air Conditioning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alignment and Balance, Tire
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning
Antenna, Fixed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antifreeze
Anti
-
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Warning Light
Appearance Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Brakes
Anti
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Theft, Radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Appearance Care Materials
Arbitration Program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-
Ashtrays
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Equipment, Adding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Systems
Auto
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Down Window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Overdrive
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transaxle
Check
Fluid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Gear Positions
Operation
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Mechanism Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B
ack
Battery
-
Saver
Up Lamps Bulb Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System Light
Jump Starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warnings
BBB Auto Line
Blizzard, Driving In
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement, Remote Keyless Entry
Better Business Bureau Mediation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Brake
Adjustment
Fluid
Parking
Pedal Travel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing System Parts
System Warning Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaxle Shift Interlock Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wear
Braking
Break
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes, Anti
BTSI Check
Headlamps
-
Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Braking in Emergencies
-
In, New Vehicle
Bulb Replacement
Back
-
Up Lamps
Center High
Dome Lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Mounted Stoplamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Turn Signal
Taillamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypass Switch, Convertible Top
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C
anadian Roadside Assistance
Capacities and Specifications
Carbon Monoxide
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cassette Deck Service
Cassette Tape Player
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
CD Adapter Kit
CD Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CD Player
Theft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Deterrent Feature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage Area
Center High
-
Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement
Center Passenger Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification Label
Chains, Safety
Chains, Tire
Changing a Flat Tire
Check Engine Light
Check Gages Light
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Chemical Paint Spotting
Child Restraints
Securing in a Rear Outside Seat Position
Securing in the Center Rear Seat Position
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position
Top Strap
Where to Put
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette Lighter
Circuit Breakers and Fuses
Cleaner, Air
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels
Convertible Top
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Fabric/Carpet
Glass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside of Your Vehicle
Instrument Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2
Interior Plastic Components
Outside of Your Vehicle
Special Problems
Stains
Tires
Vinyl
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Climate Control System, Standard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control System with Air Conditioning
Clock, Setting the
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Fluid, Hydraulic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch, Hydraulic
Comfort Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc
Adapter Kit
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Player
Theft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Deterrent Feature
Compact Spare Tire
Control of a Vehicle
Convenience Net
Convertible Top
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypass Switch
Cleaning
Lowering
Operation
Raising
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Boot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lowering Manually
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raising Manually
Removing the Boot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Convex Outside Mirror
Coolant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Tank
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Cooling System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Transportation
Cruise Control
Cupholders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
amage, Finish
Dead Battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage, Sheet Metal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defects, Reporting Safety
Defensive Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defogger, Rear Window
Defogging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defrosting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions, Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dolby B Noise Reduction
Dome Lamp Bulb Replacement
Door Locks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive, Automatic Transaxle
Driver Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-3
Driving
City
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive
Drunken
Freeway
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In a Blizzard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries
In the Rain
Night
On Curves
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Grades While Towing a Trailer
On Hill and Mountain Roads
On Snow and Ice
Through Water
Wet Roads
Winter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
With a Trailer
Drunken Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E
asy Entry Seat
Electrical Equipment, Adding
Electrical System
Engine
Coolant
Coolant Heater
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner/Filter
Coolant Level Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Temperature Gage
Exhaust
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuse Block
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Oil Level Check
Overheating
Specifications
Starting Your
Engine Oil
Adding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additives
Checking
Used
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What To Use
When to Change
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running While Parked
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Traction System
Active Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Operation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ethanol
ETS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active Light
Warning Light
Exhaust, Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F
abric Cleaning
Fabric Protection
Fifth Gear, Manual Transaxle
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Filling Your Tank
Filter, Air
Finish Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
9-4
Finish Damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First Gear, Automatic Transaxle
First Gear, Manual Transaxle
Flashers, Hazard Warning
Flash
-
To
-
Pass
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat Tire, Changing
Fluids and Lubricants
Fog Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign Countries, Fuel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fourth Gear, Manual Transaxle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
French Language Manual
Front Reading Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filling a Portable Container
Filling Your Tank
Gage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Foreign Countries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G
ages
Engine Coolant Temperature
Fuel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer
GAWR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Positions, Automatic Transaxle
Gear Positions, Manual Transaxle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide en Français
GVWR
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
H
alogen Bulbs
Head Restraints
Headlamps
yellow blue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flashers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High/Low Beam Changer
On Reminder
Wiring
Hearing Impaired, Customer Assistance
Heating
High
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Beam Headlamps
Highway Hypnosis
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill and Mountain Roads
Hitches, Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood
Checking Things Under
Prop
Horn
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Clutch
Fluid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Check
Hydroplaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I
gnition Positions
Illuminated Entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation, Tire
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5
Inspections
Brake System
Caliper/Knuckle
Engine Cooling System
Exhaust System
Front Drive Axle Boot
Front Drive Axle Seal
Steering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Throttle System
Installing the Boot
Instrument Panel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning
Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuse Block
Intensity Control
Intensity Control
Interior Lamps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
J
ack, Tire
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
K
ey Lock Cylinders Service
Key Release Button
Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
L
abels
Certification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Parts Identification
Tire
-
Loading Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Identification Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps
Exterior
Fog
Map
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Reading
Interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
On Reminder
Latches, Seatback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Leaving Your Vehicle
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine Running
Lighter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lights
Air Bag Readiness
Anti
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Lock Brake System Warning
Brake System Warning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Charging System
Check Engine
Check Gages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced Traction System Active
ETS Active
ETS Warning
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6
Interior
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Coolant Warning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil Pressure
Passlock
R
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Reminder
Up-Shift
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Your Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Locks
Door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition Transaxle Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key Lock Cylinder Service
Power Door
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Door Security
Loss of Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Low Coolant Warning Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lowering the Convertible Top Manually
Lowering Your Convertible Top
Lubricants and Fluids
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lubrication Service, Body
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M
aintenance, Normal Replacement Parts
Maintenance Record
Maintenance Schedule
Owner Checks and Services
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Scheduled Maintenance Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Short Trip/City Definition
Short Trip/City Intervals
Maintenance, Underbody
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Manual Front Seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Lumbar Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Remote Control Mirror
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manual Transaxle
Check
Fluid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Positions
Operation
Shifting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Your Engine
Methanol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mirrors
Convex Outside
Inside Day/Night Rearview
Manual Remote Control
Power Remote Control
Mobility Program
Mountain Roads
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multifunction Lever
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N
eutral, Automatic Transaxle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Neutral, Manual Transaxle
New Vehicle “Break
-
In”
Night Vision
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-7
O
Off dometer
Oil, Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer, Trip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Road Recovery
Oil Pressure Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overdrive, Automatic Transaxle
Overheating Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Checks and Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Owner Publications, Ordering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
P
aint Spotting, Chemical
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Park
Automatic Transaxle
Shifting Into
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Out of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking
At Night
Brake
Brake Mechanism Check
Lots
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over Things That Burn
With a Trailer
Passing
Passlock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Vehicle, Manual Transaxle
Passenger Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Power
Door Locks
Option Fuses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Control Mirror
Steering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Steering Fluid
Windows
Power Outlet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts
Problems on the Road
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Publications, Service and Owner
R
adio Reception
Radios
AM
AM
-
FM Stereo
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Rain, Driving In
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Raising the Convertible Top Manually
Raising Your Convertible Top
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and ATC
AM
-
FM Stereo with Compact Disc and ATC
Rear
Door Security Locks
Outside Seat Position
Seat Passengers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Defogger
Rearview Mirror
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Turn Signal Bulb Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-8
Reclining Front Seatbacks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational Vehicle Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerants, Air Conditioning
Remote Keyless Entry System
Remote Trunk Release
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removing the Boot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Bulbs
Parts
Wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reporting Safety Defects
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restraints
Checking
Child
Head
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Parts After a Crash
System Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reverse, Automatic Transaxle
Reverse, Manual Transaxle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Front Passenger Position
Roadside Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roadside Assistance, Canadian
Rocking Your Vehicle
Rotation, Tires
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S
afety Belt Extender
Safety Belts
Adults
Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Rear Passenger Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Children
Driver Position
Extender
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Wear Properly
Incorrect Usage . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap Belt
Lap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Shoulder
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Larger Children
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger Position
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Questions and Answers
Rear Comfort Guides
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Rear Seat Passengers
Reminder Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Replacing After a Crash
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right Front Passenger Position
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smaller Children and Babies
Use During Pregnancy
Why They Work
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Warnings and Symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Maintenance Services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Seatback
Latches
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reclining Front
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seats
Easy Entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Front
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Lumbar Support
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-9
Seats (Continued)
Restraint Systems
Seat Controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Securing a Child Restraint
Second Gear, Automatic Transaxle
Second Gear, Manual Transaxle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Security System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulletins, Ordering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Manuals, Ordering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts Identification Label
Publications, Ordering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work, Doing Your Own
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service and Appearance Care
Service and Owner Publications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering in Canada
Servicing Your Air Bag
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Equipped Vehicle
Sheet Metal Damage
Shift Lever
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Shift Speeds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting
Automatic Transaxle
Into Park (P)
Manual Transaxle
Out of Park
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Signaling Turns
Skidding
Spare Tire, Compact
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound Equipment, Adding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications and Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Specifications, Engine
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Impaired, Customer Assistance
Speedometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stains, Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starter Switch Check
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Starting Your Engine
Steam
Steering
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
In Emergencies
Power
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Tilt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage Compartments
Storage, Vehicle
Surge Tank, Coolant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
Sun Visors
Sunroof
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surge Tank Pressure Cap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols, Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
T
achometer
Thermostat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taillamp Bulb Replacement
Tape Player Care
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft
Theft
-
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deterrent Feature, CD Player
THEFTLOCK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-10
Third Gear, Automatic Transaxle
Third Gear, Manual Transaxle
Tilt Steering Wheel
Time, Setting the
Tire Chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Loading
Tire
Tires
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-
Loading Information Label
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alignment and Balance
Buying New
Chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a Flat
Cleaning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare
Inflation
Loading
Pressure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Check
Inspection and Rotation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temperature
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction
Treadwear
Uniform Quality Grading
Used Replacement Wheel
Wear Indicators
Wheel Replacement
When It’s Time for New
Top Strap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque Lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Torque, Wheel Nut
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
yellow blue
Towing
From the Front
From the Rear
Recreational Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Your Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
Backing Up
Brakes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving on Grades
Driving with
Making Turns
Parking on Hills
Safety Chains
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Cooling
Following Distance
Hitches
Maintenance When Towing
Passing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Total Weight on Tires
Towing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Turn Signals
Weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transaxle Fluid
Automatic
Manual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmitters, Remote Keyless Entry
Transportation, Courtesy
Trip Odometer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-11
TTY Users
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U
nderbody Flushing Service
Underbody Maintenance
Up-Shift Light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
V
ehicle
Control
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Damage Warnings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Dimensions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification Number
Loading
Storage
Visors, Sun
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ventilation System
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
arning Devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Warranty Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washer Fluid, Windshield
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
yellow blue
Washing Your Vehicle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Weatherstrips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel
Alignment
Nut Torque
Replacement
Used Replacement
Wrench
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windows
Auto
Fluid
Fuse
-
Down
Manual
Power
Blade Check
Winter Driving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Washer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check
Windshield Wiper
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blade Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper Blades, Cleaning
Wiring, Headlamp
Wrecker Towing
Wrench, Wheel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement